advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 92
OWNER’S MANUAL LED LCD TV Please read this manual carefully before operating your set and retain it for future reference. LM62** LM64** LM66** LM67** LM76** P/NO : MFL67441719 (1205-REV04) Printed in Korea www.lg.com 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS ENGLISH ENG TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 Licenses 34 Using the User guide 3 OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE 35 MAINTENANCE 35 Cleaning your TV 4 Safety Instructions 10 - Viewing 3D Imaging (Only 3D models) 35 35 - Screen, frame, cabinet and stand - Power cord 12 Installation Procedure 35TROUBLESHOOTING 12 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING 36 12 15 16 17 18 18 21 23 24 Unpacking Separate purchase Parts and buttons Lifting and moving the TV Setting up the TV - Attaching the stand Mounting on a table Mounting on a wall Tidying cables 25 MAKING CONNECTIONS 25 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 Antenna connection HDMI connection DVI to HDMI connection RGB-PC connection Component connection Composite connection Audio connection - Digital optical audio connection USB connection 30REMOTE CONTROL 32 Magic Remote Control Functions 33 33 33 Registering Magic Remote Control How to use Magic Remote Control Precautions to Take when Using the Magic Remote Control SPECIFICATIONS WARNING yy If you ignore the warning message, you may be seriously injured or there is a possibility of accident or death. CAUTION yy If you ignore the caution message, you may be slightly injured or the product may be damaged. NOTE yy The note helps you understand and use the product safely. Please read the note carefully before using the product. LICENSES / OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE 3 Supported licenses may differ by model. For more information about licenses, visit www.lg.com. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod. divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. “DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.” “DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.” “Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274” Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com . In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping and handling) upon email request to [email protected]. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product. ENGLISH ENG Licenses 4 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ENGLISH ENG Safety Instructions Please read these safety precautions carefully before using the product. WARNING Do not place the TV and remote control in the following environments: yy --A location exposed to direct sunlight --An area with high humidity such as a bathroom --Near any heat source such as stoves and other devices that produce heat --Near kitchen counters or humidifiers where they can easily be exposed to steam or oil --An area exposed to rain or wind --Near containers of water such as vases Otherwise, this may result in fire, electric shock, malfunction or product deformation. Do not place the product where it might be exposed to dust. yy This may cause a fire hazard. Mains plug is the disconnecting device. The plug must remain readily operable. yy Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Additionally, if the cord pin is wet or yy covered with dust, dry the power plug completely or wipe dust off. You may be electrocuted due to excess moisture. Make sure to connect the power cable to the grounded current. (Except for devices yy which are not grounded.) You may be electrocuted or injured. Fix the power cable completely. yy If the power cable is not fixed completely, a fire can break out. Ensure the power cord does not come into contact with hot objects such as a yy heater. This may cause a fire or an electric shock hazard. Do not place a heavy object, or the product itself, on power cables. yy Otherwise, this may result in fire or electric shock. Bend antenna cable between inside and outside building to prevent rain from yy flowing in. This may cause water damaged inside the Product and could give an electric shock. When mounting a TV it on the wall, make sure not to install TV by hanging power yy and signal cables on the back of the TV. It may cause fire, electric shock. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Do not drop the product or let it fall over when connecting external devices. yy Otherwise, this may result in injury or damage to the product. Des icca nt Keep the packing anti-moisture material or vinyl packing out of the reach of yy children. Anti-moisture material is harmful if swallowed. If swallowed by mistake, force the patient to vomit and visit the nearest hospital. Additionally, vinyl packing can cause suffocation. Keep it out of the reach of children. Do not let your children climb or cling onto the TV. yy Otherwise, the TV may fall over, which may cause serious injury. Dispose of used batteries carefully to protect a child from eating them. yy In case that it eats them, take it to see a doctor immediately. Do not insert a conductor (like a metal chopstick) into one end of the power cable yy while the other end is connected to the input terminal on the wall. Additionally, do not touch the power cable right after plugging into the wall input terminal. You may be electrocuted. (Depending on model) Do not put or store inflammable substances near the product. yy There is a danger of explosion or fire due careless handling of the inflammable substances. Do not drop metallic objects such as coins, hair pins, chopsticks or wire into the yy product, or inflammable objects such as paper and matches. Children must pay particular attention. Electrical shock, fire or injury can occur. If a foreign object is dropped into the product, unplug the power cord and contact the service centre. Do not spray water on the product or scrub with an inflammable substance (thinner yy or benzene). Fire or electric shock accident can occur. Do not allow a impact shock or any objects to fall into the product, and do not drop yy onto the screen with something. You may be injured or the product can be damaged. Never touch this product or antenna during a thunder or lighting storm. yy You may be electrocuted. Never touch the wall outlet when there is leakage of gas, open the windows and yy ventilate. It may cause a fire or a burn by a spark. ENGLISH ENG Do not plug too many electrical devices into a single multiple electrical outlet. yy Otherwise, this may result in fire due to over-heating. 5 6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ENGLISH ENG Do not disassemble, repair or modify the product at your own discretion. yy Fire or electric shock accident can occur. Contact the service center for check, calibration or repair. If any of the following occur, unplug the product immediately and contact your local yy service centre. --The product has been impacted by shock --The product has been damaged --Foreign objects have entered the product --The product produced smoke or a strange smell This may result in fire or electric shock. If you don’t intend to use the product for a long time, unplug the power cable from yy the product. Covering dust can cause a fire, or insulation deterioration can cause electric leakage, electric shock or fire. Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with yy liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Install the product where no radio wave occurs. yy There should be enough distance between an outside antenna and power lines to yy keep the former from touching the latter even when the antenna falls. This may cause an electric shock. Do not install the product on places such as unstable shelves or inclined surfaces. yy Also avoid places where there is vibration or where the product cannot be fully supported. Otherwise, the product may fall or flip over, which may cause injury or damage to the product. If you install the TV on a stand, you need to take actions to prevent the product yy from overturning. Otherwise, the product may fall over, which may cause injury. If you intend to mount the product to a wall, attach VESA standard mounting interface (optional yy parts) to the back of the product. When you install the set to use the wall mounting bracket (optional parts), fix it carefully so as not to drop. Only use the attachments / accessories specified by the manufacturer. yy When installing the antenna, consult a qualified service man. yy This may create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. 5~7 times We recommend that you maintain a distance of at least 5 to 7 times the diagonal yy screen size when watching TV. If you watch TV for a long period of time, this may cause blurred vision. Only use the specified type of battery. yy This could cause damage to the remote control. Do not mix new batteries with old batteries. yy This may cause the batteries to overheat and leak. Make sure there are no objects between the remote control and its sensor. yy Signal from the remote control may be disturbed by sun light or other strong light. yy In this case, darken the room. When connecting external devices such as video game consoles, make sure the yy connecting cables are long enough. Otherwise, the product may fall over, which may cause injury or damage the product. ENGLISH ENG CAUTION 7 8 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ENGLISH ENG Do not turn the product On/Off by plugging-in or unplugging the power plug to the yy wall outlet. (Do not use the power plug for switch.) It may cause mechanical failure or could give an electric shock. Please follow the installation instructions below to prevent the product from yy overheating. --The distance between the product and the wall should be more than 10 cm. --Do not install the product in a place with no ventilation (e.g., on a bookshelf or in a cupboard). --Do not install the product on a carpet or cushion. --Make sure the air vent is not blocked by a tablecloth or curtain. Otherwise, this may result in fire. Take care not to touch the ventilation openings when watching the TV for long yy periods as the ventilation openings may become hot. This does not affect the operation or performance of the product. Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its appearance indicates damage or yy deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord replaced with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer. Prevent dust collecting on the power plug pins or outlet. yy This may cause a fire hazard. Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as being twisted, yy kinked, pinched, closed in a door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the cord exits the appliance. Do not press strongly upon the panel with a hand or sharp object such as nail, yy pencil or pen, or make a scratch on it. Avoid touching the screen or holding your finger(s) against it for long periods of yy time. Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen. When cleaning the product and its components, unplug the power first and wipe it yy with a soft cloth. Applying excessive force may cause scratches or discolouration. Do not spray with water or wipe with a wet cloth. Never use glass cleaner, car or industrial shiner, abrasives or wax, benzene, alcohol etc., which can damage the product and its panel. Otherwise, this may result in fire, electric shock or product damage (deformation, corrosion or breakage). As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power yy source even if you turn off this unit by SWITCH. When unplugging the cable, grab the plug and unplug it. yy If the wires inside the power cable are disconnected, this may cause fire. When moving the product, make sure you turn the power off first. Then, unplug the yy power cables, antenna cables and all connecting cables. The TV set or power cord may be damaged, which may create a fire hazard or cause electric shock. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Contact the service center once a year to clean the internal parts of the product. yy Accumulated dust can cause mechanical failure. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the yy apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. If the product feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker” when it is turned yy on. This is normal, there is nothing wrong with product. The panel is a high technology display product with resolution of two million to six yy million pixels. You may see tiny black dots and/or brightly coloured dots (red, blue or green) at a size of 1 ppm on the panel. This does not indicate a malfunction and does not affect the performance and reliability of the product. This phenomenon also occurs in third-party products and is not subject to exchange or refund. You may find different brightness and color of the panel depending on your viewing yy position(left/right/top/down). This phenomenon occurs due to the characteristic of the panel. It is not related with the product performance, and it is not malfunction. Displaying a still image (e.g., broadcasting channel logo, on-screen menu, scene from a video yy game) for a prolonged time may cause damage to the screen, resulting in retention of the image, which is known as image sticking. The warranty does not cover the product for image sticking. Avoid displaying a fixed image on your television’s screen for a prolonged period (2 or more hours for LCD, 1 or more hours for Plasma). Also, if you watch the TV at a ratio of 4:3 for a long time, image sticking may occur on the borders of the panel. This phenomenon also occurs in third-party products and is not subject to exchange or refund. Generated Sound yy “Cracking” noise: A cracking noise that occurs when watching or turning off the TV is generated by plastic thermal contraction due to tempera-ture and humidity. This noise is common for products where thermal deformation is required. Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A low level noise is generated from a high-speed switching circuit, which supplies a large amount of current to operate a product. It varies depending on the product. This generated sound does not affect the performance and reliability of the product. ENGLISH ENG When moving or unpacking the product, work in pairs because the product is yy heavy. Otherwise, this may result in injury. 9 10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ENGLISH ENG Viewing 3D Imaging (Only 3D models) WARNING Viewing Environment yy Viewing Time -- When watching 3D contents, take 5 - 15 minute breaks every hour. Viewing 3D contents for a long period of time may cause headache, dizziness, fatigue or eye strain. Those that have a photosensitive seizure or chronic illness yy Some users may experience a seizure or other abnormal symptoms when they are exposed to a flashing light or particular pattern from 3D contents. yy Do not watch 3D videos if you feel nausea, are pregnant and/ or have a chronic illness such as epilepsy, cardiac disorder, or blood pressure disease, etc. yy 3D Contents are not recommended to those who suffer from stereo blindness or stereo anomaly. Double images or discomfort in viewing may be experienced. yy If you have strabismus (cross-eyed), amblyopia (weak eyesight) or astigmatism, you may have trouble sensing depth and easily feel fatigue due to double images. It is advised to take frequent breaks than the average adult. yy If your eyesight varies between your right and left eye, revise your eyesight prior to watching 3D contents. Symptoms which require discontinuation or refraining from watching 3D contents yy Do not watch 3D contents when you feel fatigue from lack of sleep, overwork or drinking. yy When these symptoms are experienced, stop using/watching 3D contents and get enough rest until the symptom subsides. -- Consult your doctor when the symptoms persist. Symptoms may include headache, eyeball pain, dizziness, nausea, palpitation, blurriness, discomfort, double image, visual inconvenience or fatigue. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 11 Viewing Environment yy Viewing Distance - Maintain a distance of at least twice the screen diagonal length when watching 3D contents. If you feel discomfort in viewing 3D contents, move further away from the TV. Viewing Age yy Infants/Children -- Usage/ Viewing 3D contents for children under the age of 5 are prohibited. -- Children under the age of 10 may overreact and become overly excited because their vision is in development (for example: trying to touch the screen or trying to jump into it. Special monitoring and extra attention is required for children watching 3D contents. -- Children have greater binocular disparity of 3D presentations than adults because the distance between the eyes is shorter than that of adults. Therefore they will perceive more stereoscopic depth compared to adults for the same 3D image. yy Teenagers -- Teenagers under the age of 19 may react with sensitivity due to stimulation from light in 3D contents. Advise them to refrain from watching 3D contens for a long time when they are tired. yy Elderly -- The elderly may perceive less 3D effect compared to the young. Do not sit closer to the TV than the recommended distance. Cautions when using the 3D glasses yy Make sure to use LG 3D glasses. Otherwise, you may not be able to view 3D videos properly. yy Do not use 3D glasses instead of your normal glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles. yy Using modified 3D glasses may cause eye strain or image distortion. yy Do not keep your 3D glasses in extremely high or low temperatures. It will cause deformation. yy The 3D glasses are fragile and are easily scratched. Always use a soft, clean piece of cloth when wiping the lenses. Do not scratch the lenses of the 3D glasses with sharp objects or clean/wipe them with chemicals. ENGLISH ENG CAUTION 12 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE / ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG NOTE yy Image shown may differ from your TV. yy Your TV’s OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual. yy The available menus and options may differ from the input source or product model that you are using. yy New features may be added to this TV in the future. yy The TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And the TV should be turned off if it will not be watched for some time, as this will reduce energy consumption. yy The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost. Installation Procedure 1 2 3 4 Open the package and make sure all the accessories are included. Attach the stand to the TV set. Connect an external device to the TV set. Make sure the network connection is available. You can use the TV network functions only when the network connection is made. ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. If there are any missing accessories, contact the local dealer where you purchased your product. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product and item. CAUTION yy Do not use any unapproved items to ensure the safety and product life span. yy Any damag or injuries caused by using unapproved items are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. yy Some models have a thin film attached on to the screen and this must not be removed. NOTE yy The items supplied with your product may vary depending on the model. yy Product specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions. yy For an optimal connection, HDMI cables and USB devices should have bezels less than 10 mm thick and 18 mm width. Use an extension cable that supports USB 2.0 if the USB cable or USB memory stick does not fit into your TV’s USB port. B B A A *A < = 10 mm *B < = 18 mm ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING TV SAVING ENERGY AV MODE INPUT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 FLASHBK LIST 3D CH P A G E Q.MENU ENTER BACK EXIT L/R SELECT FREEZE RATIO 6 8 9 0 FLASHBK MARK FAV MUTE MENU INFO 3 5 LIST MARK FAV VOL 2 4 7 TV SAVING 1 1 Remote control and batteries (AAA) (Depending on model) ( See p. 30, 31) VOL 3D CH P A G E MUTE MENU INFO P Q.MENU ENTER BACK EXIT L/R SELECT FREEZE RATIO Owner’s manual Polishing cloth (Depending on model) Use this to remove dust from the cabinet. Component video cable ( See p. 28) Composite video cable ( See p. 28) Cinema 3D Glasses The number of 3D glasses may differ depending on the model or country. Dual play glasses (Depending on model) Cable holder (Depending on model) ( See p. 24) Power Cord (Only 32/37/42/47/55LM62**) Stand Screws 8EA, M4 x 20 ( See p. 18, 19, 20) Desk-mount Screw (1EA : Only 32/42/47LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*) (2EA: Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*) ( See p. 22) Desk-mount Cable 2EA (Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*) ( See p. 22) Bracket Screw 2EA, M4 x 8 (Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*) ( See p. 22) Wall mount inner spacers 4EA (Only 32/42/47/55LM62**) ( See p. 24) or Isolator (Depending on model) ( See p. 14) ENGLISH ENG Magic Remote Control, Batteries (AA) (Only 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) ( See p. 32) ENERGY AV MODE INPUT 13 14 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG Stand Body / Stand Base (Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*) ( See p. 18, 20) Stand Body / Stand Base (Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) ( See p. 19, 20) NOTE yy Antenna Isolator Installation Guide -- Use this to install TV in a place where there is a voltage difference between TV Set and GND of antenna signal. »» If there is a voltage difference between TV Set and GND of antenna signal, the antenna contact might be heated and excessive heat might cause an accident. -- You can improve the safety when watching TV by efficiently removing power voltage from TV antenna. It is recommended to mount the isolator to the wall. If it cannot be mounted to the wall, mount it on the TV. Avoid disconnecting the antenna Isolator after installation. -- Before starting, be sure that the TV antenna is connected. 1. Connect to TV. Wall ANTENNA/ CABLE IN Cable / Antenna or Isolator 2. Connect to Set-Top box. Connect one end of the isolator to cable/antenna jack and the other to TV set or set-top box. “Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains connection or through other equipment with a connection to protective earthing - and to a cable distribution system using coaxial cable, may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a cable distribution system has therefore to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency range (galvanic isolator, see EN 60728-11)” When applying the RF Isolator, a slight loss of signal sensitivity can occur. ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING 15 Separate purchase items can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification. Contact your dealer to buy these items. These devices only work with certain models. P AG-F2**DP, AG-F3**DP Dual play glasses AG-F2**, AG-F3** Cinema 3D Glasses AN-MR300 Magic Remote Control AN-WF100 Wireless LAN 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47/55LM640* 32/42/47/55LM641*, 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76** AG-F2**DP, AG-F3**DP Dual play glasses • • AG-F2**, AG-F3** Cinema 3D Glasses • AN-MR300 Magic Remote Control • AN-WF100 Wireless LAN • Compatibility • (Depending on model) • The model name or design may be changed depending on the upgrade of product functions, manufacturer’s circumstances or policies. ENGLISH ENG Separate purchase 16 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG Parts and buttons A type : 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM66**, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76** B type : 32/42/47/55/65LM62** Screen Screen Remote control and intelligent sensors1 OK Power indicator SETTINGS Speakers Speakers INPUT Remote control and intelligent sensors1 Power indicator OK SETTINGS INPUT Buttons Touch buttons2 Button A type Description B type Scrolls through the saved programmes. H H H H H OK S H ꔉ Adjusts the volume level. Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input. SETTINGS Accesses the main menu, or saves your input and exits the menus. INPUT Changes the input source. /I Turns the power on or off. 1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment. 2 B type buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger. NOTE yy You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the main menus. ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING Please note the following advice to prevent the TV from being scratched or damaged and for safe transportation regardless of its type and size. at least 2 people. yy When transporting the TV by hand, hold the TV as shown in the following illustration. CAUTION yy Avoid touching the screen at all times, as this may result in damage to the screen. yy It is recommended to move the TV in the box or packing material that the TV originally came in. yy Before moving or lifting the TV, disconnect the power cord and all cables. yy When holding the TV, the screen should face away from you to avoid damage. yy Hold the top and bottom of the TV frame firmly. Make sure not to hold the transparent part, speaker, or speaker grill area. yy When transporting a large TV, there should be yy When transporting the TV, do not expose the TV to jolts or excessive vibration. yy When transporting the TV, keep the TV upright, never turn the TV on its side or tilt towards the left or right. yy Whenever you handle TV, Protection pad should be covered with side of TV. (Depending on model) Protection Pad ENGLISH ENG Lifting and moving the TV 17 18 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG Setting up the TV Image shown may differ from your TV. Attaching the stand 42/47LM669* 1 4 M4 x 20 Stand Body 4EA Front Stand Base M4 x 20 Top View 2 4EA Wrapping bag 5 3 Protection pad ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING 19 ENGLISH ENG 42/47/55LM660*, 42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76** 4 1 M4 x 20 Stand Body 4EA Front Stand Base M4 x 20 Top View 2 4EA Wrapping bag 5 3 Protection pad 20 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32LM669* 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661* 1 1 M4 x 20 M4 x 20 Stand Body 4EA 4EA Stand Body Front Front Stand Base Stand Base Top View 2 2 3 Top View 3 M4 x 20 4EA M4 x 20 4EA ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING yy When attaching the stand to the TV set, place the screen facing down on a cushioned table or flat surface to protect the screen from scratches. yy Make sure that the screws are fastened completely. (If they are not fastened securely enough, the TV may tilt forward after being installed.) Do not fasten the screws with too much force; otherwise they may be worn out and get loosened. Mounting on a table 1 Lift and tilt the TV into its upright position on a table. -- Leave a 10 cm (minimum) space from the wall for proper ventilation. 10 cm 10 cm m 10 c 10 cm NOTE Remove the stand before installing the TV on a wall mount by performing the stand attachment in reverse. 2 Connect the power cord to a wall outlet. CAUTION yy Do not place the TV near or on sources of heat, as this may result in fire or other damage. ENGLISH ENG CAUTION 21 22 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG Securing the TV to a table Fix the TV to a table to prevent from tilting forward, damage, and potential injury. To secure the TV to a table, insert and tighten the supplied screw on the rear of the stand. (Only 32/42/47LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*) Adjusting the angle of the TV to suit view (This feature is not available for all models.) Adjusting the angle of the TV to suit view Swivel 20 degrees to the left or right and adjust the angle of the TV to suit your view. (Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*) 20 (Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*) M4 x 8 2EA NOTE (Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*) How to fix the TV to a table 1.Connect the Desk-mount Cables to the Stand Base using the Bracket Screws. 2.Fix the Desk-mount Cables to a table using the Desk-mount Screws. 3.Once the TV is fixed, move the table close to the wall. Children may go in, causing injuries. WARNING yy To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should be securely attached to the floor/ wall per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or rocking the TV may cause injury. 20 Swivel 10 degrees to the left or right and adjust the angle of the TV to suit your view. (Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) 10 10 CAUTION When adjusting the angle of the product, watch out for your fingers. »»Personal injury may occur if hands or fingers are pinched. If the product is tilted too much, it may fall, causing damage or injury. (Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) <Rear> <Front> ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING 23 Mounting on a wall (This feature is not available for all models.) Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear of the TV carefully and install the wall mount bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When you attach the TV to other building materials, please contact qualified personnel. LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 1 Insert and tighten the eye-bolts, or TV brackets and bolts on the back of the TV. -- If there are bolts inserted at the eye-bolts position, remove the bolts first. 2 Mount the wall brackets with the bolts to the wall. Match the location of the wall bracket and the eye-bolts on the rear of the TV. 3 Connect the eye-bolts and wall brackets tightly with a sturdy rope. Make sure to keep the rope horizontal with the flat surface. Make sure to use screws and wall mount bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard dimensions for the wall mount kits are described in the following table. Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket) Model 32LM62** 32LM64** 32LM66** VESA (A x B) Standard screw Number of screws Wall mount bracket 200 x 200 M6 4 LSW200BX 42/47/55LM62** 42/47/55/60LM64** 42/47/55LM66** 42/47/55LM67** 42/47/55LM76** 400 x 400 M6 4 LSW400BX LSW220BX LSW420BX 65LM62** 600 x 400 M8 4 LSW600B LSW620B CAUTION yy Make sure that children do not climb on or hang on the TV. NOTE yy Use a platform or cabinet that is strong and large enough to support the TV securely. yy Brackets, bolts and ropes are not provided. You can obtain additional accessories from your local dealer. Model VESA (A x B) Standard screw Number of screws Wall mount bracket A B ENGLISH ENG Securing the TV to a wall 24 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING ENGLISH ENG CAUTION yy Disconnect the power first, and then move or install the TV. Otherwise electric shock may occur. yy If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe injury. Use an authorised LG wall mount and contact the local dealer or qualified personnel. yy Do not over tighten the screws as this may cause damage to the TV and void your warranty. yy Use the screws and wall mounts that meet the VESA standard. Any damages or injuries by misuse or using an improper accessory are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. NOTE yy Use the screws that are listed on the VESA standard screw specifications. yy The wall mount kit includes an installation manual and necessary parts. yy The wall mount bracket is not provided. You can obtain additional accessories from your local dealer. yy The length of screws may differ depending on the wall mount. Make sure to use the proper length. yy For more information, refer to the manual supplied with the wall mount. yy When attaching a third-party wall mounting bracket to the TV, insert the wall mount inner spacers into the TV wall mount holes to move your TV in vertical angle. Please make sure not to use the spacers for LG wall mounting bracket. (Only 32/42/47/55LM62**) Tidying cables Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669* 1 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable Holder. Cable Holder Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76** 1 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable Management. 2 Fix the Cable Management firmly to the TV. Cable Holder Cable Management CAUTION Do not move the TV by holding the cable holders, as the cable holders may break, and injuries and damage to the TV may occur. Wall Mount Inner Spacer (Depending on model) yy In order to protect the TV screen(scratch, fingerprint), put TV on flat table without removing wrapping bag. yy After removing the wrapping bag on the back of the TV, install TV according to manual included in wall mounting bracket product. yy Remove protection pads after installing TV. MAKING CONNECTIONS Antenna connection Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an RF cable (75 Ω). This section on MAKING CONNECTIONS mainly uses diagrams for the LM76** models. Connect various external devices to the TV and switch input modes to select an external device. For more information of external device’s connection, refer to the manual provided with each device. Available external devices are: HD receivers, DVD players, VCRs, audio systems, USB storage devices, PC, gaming devices, and other external devices. NOTE yy The external device connection may differ from the model. yy Connect external devices to the TV regardless of the order of the TV port. yy If you record a TV program on a DVD recorder or VCR, make sure to connect the TV signal input cable to the TV through a DVD recorder or VCR. For more information of recording, refer to the manual provided with the connected device. yy Refer to the external equipment’s manual for operating instructions. yy If you connect a gaming device to the TV, use the cable supplied with the gaming device. yy In PC mode, there may be noise associated with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is present, change the PC output to another resolution, change the refresh rate to another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the PICTURE menu until the picture is clear. yy In PC mode, some resolution settings may not work properly depending on the graphics card. IN ANTENNA/CABLE NOTE yy Use a signal splitter to use more than 2 TVs. yy If the image quality is poor, install a signal amplifier properly to improve the image quality. y y If the image quality is poor with an antenna connected, try to realign the antenna in the correct direction. y y An antenna cable and converter are not supplied. ENGLISH ENG MAKING CONNECTIONS 25 26 MAKING CONNECTIONS Transmits the digital video and audio signals from an external device to the TV. Connect the external device and the TV with the HDMI cable as shown. IN 3 4 (PC) Choose any HDMI input port to connect. It does not matter which port you use. 2 DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / HD STB / PC 1(ARC) ENGLISH ENG HDMI connection (*Not Provided) HDMI NOTE yy It is recommended to use the TV with the HDMI connection for the best image quality. yy Use the latest High Speed HDMI™ Cable with CEC (Customer Electronics Control) function. yy High Speed HDMI™ Cables are tested to carry an HD signal up to 1080p and higher. yy Supported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, HE-AAC yy Supported HDMI Audio format : Dolby Digital, PCM (Up to 192 KHz, 32k/44.1k/48k /88k/96k/176k/192k, DTS Not supported.) ARC (Audio Return Channel) An external audio device that supports yy SIMPLINK and ARC must be connected using HDMI IN 1 (ARC) port. When connected with a high-speed yy HDMI cable, the external audio device that supports ARC outputs optical SPDIF without additional optical audio cable and supports the SIMPLINK function. MAKING CONNECTIONS 27 RGB-PC connection Transmits the digital video signal from an external device to the TV. Connect the external device and the TV with the DVI-HDMI cable as shown. To transmit an audio signal, connect an audio cable. Transmits the video signal from PC to the TV. To transmit an audio signal, connect an audio cable. 4 (PC) Choose any HDMI input port to connect. It does not matter which port you use. (PC) IN (RGB/HDMI-PC) AUDIO IN 3 RGB 2 (*Not Provided) IN AUDIO 1(ARC) (RGB/HDMI-PC) RGB OUT (PC) AUDIO OUT PC (*Not Provided) AUDIO OUT DVI OUT DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / PC NOTE yy Depending on the graphics card, DOS mode may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in use. y y It is recommended to connect the DVI-HDMI to HDMI IN 4. ENGLISH ENG DVI to HDMI connection 28 MAKING CONNECTIONS ENGLISH ENG Component connection Composite connection Transmits analog video and audio signals from an external device to the TV. Connect the external device and the TV with a component cable as shown. Transmits analog video and audio signals from an external device to the TV. Connect the external device and the TV with the composite cable as shown. IN AV VIDEO PR (Use the composite video cable provided.) YELLOW PB AV Y VIDEO (Use the component video cable provided.) GREEN (Use the composite video cable provided.) COMPONENT PR RED RED WHITE BLUE (*Not Provided) (*Not Provided) RED WHITE YELLOW RED BLUE GREEN RED WHITE L Y PB WHITE BLUE GREEN VCR / DVD / Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box AUDIO YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW GREEN RED RED RED WHITE RED WHITE YELLOW DVD / Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box IN COMPONENT AUDIO R AUDIO VIDEO NOTE yy If cables are installed incorrectly, it could cause the image to display in black and white or with distorted colour. VIDEO L (MONO) AUDIO R MAKING CONNECTIONS 29 USB connection You may use an optional external audio system instead of the built-in speaker. Connect a USB storage device such as a USB flash memory, external hard drive, or a USB memory card reader to the TV and access the Smart Share menu to use various multimedia files. NOTE 3 USB Apps yy If you use an optional external audio device instead of the built-in speaker, set the TV speaker feature to off. Digital optical audio connection USB IN 2 USB Hub Hub HDD 1 HDD IN Transmits a digital audio signal from the TV to an external device. Connect the external device and the TV with the optical audio cable as shown. OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO (*Not Provided) (*Not Provided) NOTE yy To use a USB Hub device, make sure that it is connected to the USB IN 2 USB Hub port. yy Some USB Hubs may not work. If a USB device connected using a USB Hub is not detected, connect it to the USB port on the TV directly. (*Not Provided) Digital Audio System USB OPTICAL AUDIO IN NOTE yy Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser beam may damage your vision. yy Audio with ACP (Audio Copy Protection) function may block digital audio output. ENGLISH ENG Audio connection 30 REMOTE CONTROL ENGLISH ENG REMOTE CONTROL (Depending on model) The descriptions in this manual are based on the buttons on the remote control. Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly. To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AAA) matching the and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse. CAUTION yy Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control. yy In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work. Make sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV. (Only LM669*) 3D Used for viewing 3D video. TV/RAD TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme. GUIDE Shows programme guide. INFO Views the information of the current programme and screen. SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. Q. MENU Accesses the quick menus. INPUT Changes the input source. LIST Accesses the saved programme list. Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. HOME Accesses the Home menus. MY APPS Shows the list of Apps. Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right) Scrolls through menus or options. OK Selects menus or options and confirms your input. (Back) Returns to the previous level. POWER GUIDE INFO SUBTITLE Q.MENU EXIT Clears on-screen displays and return to TV viewing. FAV Accesses your favourite programme list. INPUT (User Guide) Sees user-guide. Q.VIEW LIST HOME MY APPS EXIT FAV P MUTE 1 P A G E LIVE TV REC TEXT T.OPT 2 PAGE Moves to the previous or next screen. 1 Colour buttons These access special functions in some menus. ( : Red, : Green, : Yellow, : Blue) LIVE TV Return to LIVE TV. Control buttons ( ) Controls the Premium contents, DVR or Smart Share menus or the SIMPLINK compatible devices (USB or SIMPLINK or DVR). REC Uses to adjust DVR menu. 2 TELETEXT BUTTONS These buttons are used for teletext. REMOTE CONTROL 31 (User Guide) Sees user-guide. EXIT Clears on-screen displays and return to TV viewing. RATIO Resizes an image. RATIO INPUT Changes the input source. TV/ RAD TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme. LIST Accesses the saved programme list. Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. FAV Accesses your favourite programme list. 3D Used for viewing 3D video. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LIST 0 Q.VIEW P A G E MUTE SETTINGS MY APPS OK HOME Accesses the Home menus. (Back) Returns to the previous level. GUIDE Shows programme guide. 2 TELETEXT BUTTONS These buttons are used for teletext. SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. FAV PAGE Moves to the previous or next screen. SETTINGS Accesses the main menus. MY APPS Shows the list of Apps. Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right) Scrolls through menus or options. OK Selects menus or options and confirms your input. 1 Colour buttons These access special functions in some menus. ( : Red, : Green, : Yellow, : Blue) INPUT 1 2 GUIDE EXIT T.OPT Q.MENU SUBTITLE TEXT LIVE TV REC ENERGY INFO SAVING Q. MENU Accesses the quick menus. LIVE TV Return to LIVE TV. Control buttons ( ) Controls the Premium contents, DVR or Smart Share menus or the SIMPLINK compatible devices (USB or SIMPLINK or DVR). REC Uses to adjust DVR menu. ENERGY SAVING Adjusts the brightness of the screen to reduce energy consumption. INFO Views the information of the current programme and screen. SIMPLINK Accesses the AV devices connected with the HDMI cable through HDMI-CEC. Opens the SIMPLINK menu. ENGLISH ENG (Only LM62**, LM64**, LM660*, LM661*, LM67**, LM76**) 32 Magic Remote Control Functions ENGLISH ENG Magic Remote Control Functions This item is not included for all models. When the message “Magic Remote Control battery is low. Change the battery.” is displayed, replace the battery. To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AA) matching and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. Be sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV. To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse. CAUTION yy Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control. (Only 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**,42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) Pointer (RF transmitter) (POWER) Turns the TV on or off. BACK Returns to the previous level. BACK HOME HOME Accesses the Home menu. Navigation buttons (up/down/ left/right) Scrolls through menus or options. Wheel(OK) Selects menus or options and confirms your input. Scrolls through the saved programmes. If you press the navigation button while moving the pointer on the screen, the pointer disappears, and the Magic Remote Control works as a regular remote control. To display the pointer again, shake the Magic Remote Control from side to side. P MY APPS + Adjusts the volume level. ꕌPꕍ Scrolls through the saved programmes or channels. MUTE Mutes all sounds. MY APPS Shows the list of Apps. 3D Used for viewing 3D video. 11-1 Brief Info Title Test... Info. 1 If you press Wheel(OK) on the Magic Remote Control, the following screen appears. Shows information about the current programmes and screen. Pressing this button will display number keypad My Apps 3 2 which you can select programme number. 3 You can select My Apps Menu. Magic Remote Control Functions It is necessary to ‘pair’ (register) the magic remote control to your TV before it will work. BACKto register HOME How the Magic Remote Control P MY APPS 1 To register automatically, turn the TV on and press the Wheel(OK) button. When registration is completed, the completion message appears on the screen. 2 If registration fails, turn the TV off and back on, then press the Wheel(OK) button to complete registration. How to re-register the Magic Remote Control BACK HOME 1 Press and hold the BACK and HOME buttons together for 5 seconds to reset, then register it by following “How to register the Magic Remote Control” above. 2 To re-register the Magic Remote Control, press and hold the BACK button for 5 seconds toward the TV. When registration is completed, the completion message appears on the screen. How to use Magic Remote Control 1 If the pointer disappears, move the Magic Remote Control slightly to left or right. Then, it will automatically appear on the screen. »»If the pointer has not been used for a certain period of time, it will disappear. 2 You can move the pointer by aiming the Pointer Receiver of the Magic Remote Control at your TV then move it left, right, up or down. »»If the pointer does not work properly, leave the Magic Remote Control for 10 seconds then use it again. Precautions to Take when Using the Magic Remote Control Use the Magic Remote Control within the yy maximum communication distance (10 m). Using the Magic Remote Control beyond this distance, or with an object obstructing it, may cause a communication failure. A communication failure may occur due to yy nearby devices. Electrical devices such as a microwave oven or wireless LAN product may cause interference, as these use the same bandwidth (2.4 GHz) as the Magic Remote Control. The Magic Remote Control may be damaged yy or may malfunction if it is dropped or receives a heavy impact. Take care not to bump into nearby furniture yy or other people when using the Magic Remote Control. Manufacturer and installer cannot provide yy service related to human safety as the applicable wireless device has possibility of electric wave interference. It is recommended that an Access Point (AP) yy be located more than 1 m away from the TV. If the AP is installed closer than 1 m, the Magic Remote Control may not perform as expected due to frequency interference. ENGLISH ENG Registering Magic Remote Control 33 34 USING THE USER GUIDE ENGLISH ENG Using the User guide User Guide allows you to more easily access the detailed TV information. 1 Press the HOME button to access the HOME menu. 2 Select User Guide and press Wheel(OK). 1 User Guide OPTION > To set language HOME Settings OPTION Language Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen. Menu Language Selects a language for the display text. PROGRAMME Setting [In Digital Mode Only] Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several audio languages, you can select the language you want. PICTURE, SOUND Setting Subtitle Language OPTION [In Digital Mode Only] Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. ✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed. LG SMART Function Advanced Function 2 Information My Apps Input List Settings Live TV Search Internet 3D LG Smart W Programme Guide User Guide yy You can also access the User Guide by pressing (User Guide) in the remote control. 4 3 To use Energy Saving feature To set time options PICTURE, SOUND Setting OPTION Disabled Assistance Advanced Function Information To set TV lock options To set language LG SMART Function 2 Close Menu Language Selects a language for the display text. [In Digital Mode Only] Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several audio languages, you can select the language you want. [In Digital Mode Only] Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle Subtitle languages are broadcast. Language ✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed. Try Now To set Magic Remote Control 1 Shows the current watching programme or input source screen. 2 Allows to select the category you want. 3 Allows to select the item you want. You can use ꕌ/ꕍto move between pages. 4 Allows to browse the description of the function you want from the index. 3 Zoom Out Close 1 Shows the description of the selected menu. You can use ꕌ/ꕍto move between pages. 2 Moves to the selected menu directly from the User Guide. 3 Zooms in or out the screen. To use input device PROGRAMME Setting Zoom In HOME Settings OPTION Language Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen. NOTE 1 3 Recent List User Guide User Guide Try Now MAINTENANCE / TROUBLESHOOTING 35 Cleaning your TV Clean your TV regularly to keep the best performance and to extend the product lifespan. CAUTION yy Make sure to turn the power off and disconnect the power cord and all other cables first. yy When the TV is left unattended and unused for a long time, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent possible damage from lightning or power surges. Screen, frame, cabinet and stand yy To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the surface with a dry, clean, and soft cloth. yy To remove major dirt, wipe the surface with a soft cloth dampened in clean water or a diluted mild detergent. Then wipe immediately with a dry cloth. CAUTION yy Avoid touching the screen at all times, as this may result in damage to the screen. yy Do not push, rub, or hit the screen surface with your fingernail or a sharp object, as this may result in scratches and image distortions. yy Do not use any chemicals as this may damage the product. yy Do not spray liquid onto the surface. If water enters the TV, it may result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction. Power cord Remove the accumulated dust or dirt on the power cord regularly. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Solution Cannot control the TV with the remote control. yy Check the remote control sensor on the product and try again. yy Check if there is any obstacle between the product and the remote control. to , to ). yy Check if the batteries are still working and properly installed ( No image display and no sound is produced. yy Check if the product is turned on. yy Check if the power cord is connected to a wall outlet. yy Check if there is a problem in the wall outlet by connecting other products. The TV turns off suddenly. yy Check the power control settings. The power supply may be interrupted. yy Check if the Auto sleep feature is activated in the Time settings. yy If there is no signal while the TV is on, the TV will turn off automatically after 15 minutes of inactivity. When connecting to the PC (RGB/ HDMI DVI), ‘No signal’ or ‘Invalid Format’ is displayed. yy Turn the TV off/on using the remote control. yy Reconnect the RGB/HDMI cable. yy Restart the PC with the TV on. ENGLISH ENG MAINTENANCE 36 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH ENG SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions. (Only 32/42/47/55LM641*, 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**) Wireless LAN module (WN8122E) specification Standard IEEE802.11a/b/g/n 2400 to 2483.5 MHz Frequency Range 5150 to 5250 MHz 5725 to 5850 MHz Modulation CCK / OFDM / MIMO 802.11a: 14 dBm Output Power (Typical) 802.11b: 17 dBm 802.11g: 15 dBm 802.11n - 2.4GHz: 13.5 dBm 802.11n - 5GHz: 12 dBm 802.11a/g: 54 Mbps Data rate 802.11b: 11 Mbps 802.11n: 300 Mbps Antenna Gain (Typical) Occupied bandwidth 2400 to 2483.5 MHz: -0.79dBi 5150 to 5250 MHz: 0.62dBi 5725 to 5850 MHz: 0.52dBi 802.11a/b/g: HT20 802.11n: HT20/40 Because band channel used by the country could be different, the user can not change or adjust the yy operating frequency and this product is set for the regional frequency table. Bluetooth module (BM-LDS302) specification Standard Frequency Range Output Power (Max.) Data rate (Max.) Communication Distance Bluetooth Version 3.0 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz 10 dBm or lower 3 Mbps Line of Open Sight approx. 10 m SPECIFICATIONS 37 MODELS Dimensions (W x H x D) With stand (mm) Weight With stand (kg) Power requirement MODELS Weight With stand (mm) Without stand (kg) MODELS Weight 47LM62** 42LM6200-TA 42LM620Y-TA 47LM6200-TA 47LM620Y-TA 746.0 x 528.0 x 204.0 979.0 x 660.0 x 269.0 1089.0 x 722.0 x 269.0 979.0 x 594.0 x 35.5 1089.0 x 655.0 x 35.5 15.6 18.1 13.1 15.6 8.5 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 55LM62** 65LM62** 55LM6200-TA 55LM620Y-TA 65LM6200-TA 65LM620Y-TA 1263.0 x 822.0 x 315.0 1539.0 x 993.0 x 354.0 Without stand(mm) 1263.0 x 754.0 x 35.5 25.5 With stand (kg) Power requirement Dimensions (W x H x D) 42LM62** Without stand(mm) 746.0 x 462.0 x 35.5 9.8 Without stand (kg) Dimensions (W x H x D) 32LM62** 32LM6200-TA 32LM620Y-TA With stand (mm) 21.9 Power requirement MODELS With stand (mm) 45.8 40.6 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 32LM64** 42LM64** 47LM64** 32LM6400-TA 32LM640Y-TA 32LM6410-TB 32LM641Y-TB 42LM6400-TA 42LM640Y-TA 42LM6410-TB 42LM641Y-TB 47LM6400-TA 47LM640Y-TA 47LM6410-TB 47LM641Y-TB 729.0 x 502.0 x 225.0 964.0 x 644.9 x 263.0 1073.0 x 705.0 x 263.0 964.0 x 577.7 x 35.7 1073.0 x 639.0 x 35.7 14.3 16.9 12.1 14.7 Without stand(mm) 729.0 x 444.0 x 35.9 9.4 With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) 1539.0 x 924.0 x 38.1 7.8 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 55LM64** 60LM64** 55LM6400-TA 55LM640Y-TA 55LM6410-TB 55LM641Y-TB 60LM6450-TA 60LM645Y-TA 32LM660* 32LM6600-TA 32LM660Y-TA 1243.2 x 799.5 x 331.0 1391.1 x 905.2 x 334.7 855.0 x 587.0 x 225.0 Dimensions (W x H x D) Without stand(mm) 1243.2 x 735.0 x 36.0 Weight With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) 1391.1 x 835.5 x 52.5 855.0 x 524.0 x 35.6 24.7 42.6 9.5 21.0 38.5 8.0 Power requirement AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz MODELS 32LM661* 32LM669* 42LM660* 32LM6610-TB 32LM661Y-TB 32LM6690-TC 32LM669Y-TC 42LM6600-TA 42LM660Y-TA 855.0 x 587.0 x 225.0 719.0 x 499.0 x 204.0 953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0 719.0 x 435.0 x 35.6 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4 9.5 14.8 8.0 12.6 Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight With stand (mm) Without stand(mm) 855.0 x 524.0 x 35.6 9.5 With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) Power requirement 8.0 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ENGLISH ENG Product specifications may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions. For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. 38 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH ENG MODELS Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight With stand (mm) 42LM661* 42LM669* 47LM660* 42LM6610-TB 42LM661Y-TB 42LM6690-TC 42LM669Y-TC 47LM6600-TA 47LM660Y-TA 953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0 953.0 x 627.0 x 269.0 1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4 15.1 17.4 12.6 15.2 Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4 14.8 With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) Power requirement 12.6 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 47LM661* MODELS Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight 47LM6610-TB 47LM661Y-TB With stand (mm) Power requirement MODELS Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight With stand (mm) 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4 1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6 17.7 25.0 15.2 21.3 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 42LM67** 47LM67** 55LM67** 42LM6700-TA 42LM6710-TB 42LM670Y-TA 42LM671Y-TB 47LM6700-TA 47LM6710-TB 47LM670Y-TA 47LM671Y-TB 55LM6700-TA 55LM6710-TB 55LM670Y-TA 55LM671Y-TB 953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0 1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4 1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6 With stand (kg) 17.5 25.0 Without stand (kg) 12.6 15.3 21.3 With stand (mm) AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 42LM76** 47LM76** 55LM76** 42LM7600-TA 42LM7610-TB 42LM760Y-TA 42LM761Y-TB 47LM7600-TA 47LM7610-TB 47LM760Y-TA 47LM761Y-TB 55LM7600-TA 55LM7610-TB 55LM760Y-TA 55LM761Y-TB 953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0 1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4 1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6 17.5 25.0 15.3 21.3 Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4 15.0 With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) Power requirement Environment condition 47LM6690-TC 47LM669Y-TC 14.8 MODELS Weight 15.2 Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4 Power requirement Dimensions (W x H x D) 55LM66** 55LM6600-TA 55LM6610-TB 55LM660Y-TA 55LM661Y-TB 1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 1063.0 x 692.0 x 269.0 1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0 Without stand(mm) 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4 17.4 With stand (kg) Without stand (kg) 47LM669* 12.8 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz Operating Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C Operating Humidity Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20 °C to 60 °C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % SPECIFICATIONS Television System Programme Coverage Australia Television System Programme Coverage Indonesia, Israel, Myanmar, Sri Lanka Television System Programme Coverage Vietnam, Malaysia Television System Programme Coverage Iran, Algeria, Tunisia, Digital model Television System Programme Coverage Analogue model, India, Thailand, South Africa-- Television System Programme Coverage External Antenna Impedance Analogue TV DVB-T PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 06 to 12, UHF 27 to 69 DVB-T UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 6 to 12, UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 5 to 12, UHF 21 to 69 BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 PAL B/B B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to 44 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 - PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M - BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 75 Ω 75 Ω ENGLISH ENG New Zealand, Singapore Digital TV 39 40 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH ENG HDMI/DVI-DTV supported mode Component port connecting information Resolution Horizontal Frequency (kHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) 720X480 31.469 31.5 59.94 60 720X576 31.25 50 1280X720 37.5 44.96 45 50 59.94 60 1920X1080 33.72 33.75 28.125 26.97 27 33.716 33.75 56.25 67.43 67.5 59.94 60 50 23.97 24 29.976 30.00 50 59.94 60 Component ports on the TV Y PB PR Video output ports on DVD player Y Y Y Y PB B-Y Cb Pb PR R-Y Cr Pr Signal Component 480i/576i O 480p/576p O 720p/1080i O 1080p O (50 Hz / 60 Hz only) SPECIFICATIONS 41 Video, which is input as below media contents is switched into the 3D screen automatically. yy 3D supported mode automatically Input Signal 640 X 480 480p 576p 720p HDMI 1080i 1080p Horizontal Vertical Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz) 31.469 / 31.5 62.938 / 63 31.469 / 31.5 59.94 / 60 62.938 / 63 31.25 62.5 50 37.50 50 44.96 / 45 59.94 / 60 75 50 89.91 / 90 59.94 / 60 28.125 50 33.72 / 33.75 59.94 / 60 56.25 50 67.5 59.94 / 60 26.97 / 27 23.97 / 24 28.125 25 33.72 / 33.75 29.976 / 30 43.94 / 54 23.97 / 24 56.25 25 67.432 / 67.5 29.976 / 30 56.25 50 67.432 / 67.5 59.94 / 60 USB 1080p 33.75 30 DLNA 1080p 33.75 30 Playable 3D video format Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Line Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Line Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Line Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Line Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Field Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full) Frame Packing, Line Alternative Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half) Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom, Checker Board, MPO(Photo), JPS(Photo) ENGLISH ENG 3D supported mode 42 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH ENG For models supporting WiDi, you can set the 3D mode in the same way as in RGB (PC) mode. yy 3D supported mode manually Input Signal 720p 1080i HDMI-DTV 1080p HDMI-PC RGB-PC Horizontal Vertical Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz) 37.50 50 45.00 60 28.12 50 33.75 60 27.00 24 28.12 25 33.75 30 56.25 50 67.50 60 1024x768 48.36 1360x768 47.71 1920x1080 67.50 Others 1024x768 1360x768 48.36 47.71 1920x1080 67.50 Others 720p 1080i Component 1080p Playable 3D video format 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom, Single Frame Sequential 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom, Checker Board 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom, Checker Board, Single Frame Sequential, Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom 60 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom, Checker Board, Single Frame Sequential, Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving - 2D to 3D 60 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom - - 2D to 3D 37.50 50 45.00 60 28.12 50 33.75 60 27.00 24 28.12 25 33.75 30 56.25 50 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom 67.50 60 Others - - 2D to 3D USB 1080p 33.75 30 DLNA 1080p 33.75 30 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),Top & Bottom, Checker Board, Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving(Photo : Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom) DTV Signal Playable 3D video format HD 2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom SD 2D to 3D (Only DTV) Record the model number and serial number of the TV. Refer to the label on the back cover and quote this information to your dealer when requiring any service. MODEL SERIAL ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﻢ 45 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 44 ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ، ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﻬﻢ 43 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ 42 . ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪRGB (PC) ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ3 ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ، ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪWiDi • ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ 3D supported mode manually Vertical Horizontal Frequency (Hz) Frequency (kHz) Signal Input ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ Playable 3D video format HDMI-DTV HDMI-PC RGB-PC Component USB DLNA Signal HD SD DTV 41 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ 3D ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ . ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ3 • ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 3D supported mode automatically Playable 3D video format Vertical Horizontal Frequency (Hz) Frequency (kHz) Signal Input HDMI USB DLNA 40 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ HDMI/DVI-DTV ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ)ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ Y PB PR 480x720 31.469 31.5 59.94 60 ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ DVD Y PB PR 576x720 31.25 50 Y B-Y R-Y 720x1280 37.5 44.96 45 50 59.94 60 Y Cb Cr Y Pb Pr 1080x1920 33.72 33.75 28.125 26.97 27 33.716 33.75 56.25 67.43 67.5 59.94 60 50 23.97 24 29.976 30.00 50 59.94 60 ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ 480i/576i O 480p/576p O 720p/1080i O 1080p O ) ٥٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٦٠ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ( 39 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I DVB-T ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 PAL B/B B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to 44 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 06 to 12, UHF 27 to 69 DVB-T UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 6 to 12, UHF 21 to 69 DVB-T VHF 5 to 12, UHF 21 to 69 ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ، ﺍﺳﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ،ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﺰی ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ،ﺑﺮﻣﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﺰی،ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ، ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺮﻩ،ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ،ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ - ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47 M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71 - ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 75 Ω ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M 75 Ω ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ،ﺯﻻﻧﺪﻧﻮ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﻫﻨﺪﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ، ﻣﺪﻝ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎی، ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ، --ﺟﻨﻮﺑﯽ 38 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ *42LM661 *42LM669 *47LM660 42LM6610-TB 42LM661Y-TB 42LM6690-TC 42LM669Y-TC 47LM6600-TA 47LM660Y-TA ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0 269.0 x 627.0 x 953.0 263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0 33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0 33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 14.8 15.1 17.4 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻭﺯﻥ 12.6 12.6 15.2 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz *47LM661 *47LM669 **55LM66 47LM6610-TB 47LM661Y-TB 47LM6690-TC 47LM669Y-TC 55LM6600-TA 55LM6610-TB 55LM660Y-TA 55LM661Y-TB ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0 269.0 x 692.0 x 1063.0 331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0 33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0 33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 17.4 17.7 25.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ 15.2 15.2 21.3 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz **42LM67 **47LM67 **55LM67 42LM6700-TA 42LM6710-TB 42LM670Y-TA 42LM671Y-TB 47LM6700-TA 47LM6710-TB 47LM670Y-TA 47LM671Y-TB 55LM6700-TA 55LM6710-TB 55LM670Y-TA 55LM671Y-TB ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0 263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0 331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0 33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0 33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 14.8 17.5 25.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ 12.6 15.3 21.3 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz **42LM76 **47LM76 **55LM76 42LM7600-TA 42LM7610-TB 42LM760Y-TA 42LM761Y-TB 47LM7600-TA 47LM7610-TB 47LM760Y-TA 47LM761Y-TB 55LM7600-TA 55LM7610-TB 55LM760Y-TA 55LM761Y-TB ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0 263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0 331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0 33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0 33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 15.0 17.5 25.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ 12.8 15.3 21.3 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی 0ﺑﻪ 40 ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 80ﺩﺭﺻﺪ 60ﺑﻪ -20 ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 85ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ 37 ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ. 32LM6200-TA 32LM620Y-TA 42LM6200-TA 42LM620Y-TA ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 204.0 X 528.0 x 746.0 269.0 x 660.0 x 979.0 269.0 x 722.0 x 1089.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 35.5 X 462.0 x 746.0 35.5 x 594.0 x 979.0 35.5 x 655.0 x 1089.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 9.8 15.6 18.1 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ 8.5 13.1 15.6 ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ﻣﺪﻝ **55LM62 55LM6200-TA 55LM620Y-TA **65LM62 65LM6200-TA 65LM620Y-TA ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 315.0 x 822.0 x 1263.0 354.0 x 993.0 x 1539.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 35.5 x 754.0 x 1263.0 38.1 x 924.0 x 1539.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 25.5 45.8 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 21.9 40.6 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 HZ AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 HZ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ **32LM64 **42LM64 **47LM64 32LM6400-TA 32LM640Y-TA 32LM6410-TB 32LM641Y-TB 42LM6400-TA 42LM640Y-TA 42LM6410-TB 42LM641Y-TB 47LM6400-TA 47LM640Y-TA 47LM6410-TB 47LM641Y-TB ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 225.0 x 502.0 x 729.0 263.0 x 644.9 x 964.0 263.0 x 705.0 x 1073.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 35.9 x 444.0 x 729.0 35.7 x 577.7 x 964.0 35.7 x 639.0 x 1073.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 9.4 14.3 16.9 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 7.8 12.1 14.7 ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ﻣﺪﻝ **55LM64 55LM6400-TA 55LM640Y-TA 55LM6410-TB 55LM641Y-TB **60LM64 *32LM660 60LM6450-TA 60LM645Y-TA 32LM6600-TA 32LM660Y-TA ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 331.0 x 799.5 x 1243.2 334.7 x 905.2 x 1391.1 225.0 x 587.0 x 855.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 36.0 x 735.0 x 1243.2 52.5 x 835.5 x 1391.1 35.6 x 524.0 x 855.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 24.7 42.6 9.5 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ 21.0 38.5 8.0 ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ﻣﺪﻝ **32LM661 32LM6610-TB 32LM661Y-TB *32LM669 32LM6690-TC 32LM669Y-TC *42LM660 42LM6600-TA 42LM660Y-TA ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 225.0 x 587.0 x 855.0 204.0 x 499.0 x 719.0 263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( 35.6 x 524.0 x 855.0 35.6 x 435.0 x 719.0 33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0 ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 9.5 9.5 14.8 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ( 8.0 8.0 12.6 AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ **32LM62 **42LM62 **47LM62 47LM6200-TA 47LM620Y-TA 36 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ( ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )(WN8122E ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻟﯽ • ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )(BM-LDS302 ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ( ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ 35 ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی /ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ • ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﻗﺎﺏ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ،ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • • • • ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ،ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ،ﻧﻮﻙ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ،ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. • ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎ (. • ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ) .ﺑﺎ ، ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ 15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ "ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻧﻴﺴﺖ"ﻳﺎ" ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮﺍﺳﺖ"ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ /ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﮐﺎﺑﻞ RGB/HDMIﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 34 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 1 User Guide OPTION > To set language HOME Settings ¨ OPTION ¨ Language Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen. .ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ Menu Language Selects a language for the display text. PROGRAMME Setting HOME ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭUser Guide ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ .ﺩﻫﻴﺪ [In Digital Mode Only] Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several audio languages, you can select the language you want. PICTURE, SOUND Setting Subtitle Language OPTION [In Digital Mode Only] Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. ✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed. LG SMART Function Advanced Function 2 Information Try Now 3 Zoom In Close HOME Settings ¨ OPTION ¨ Language Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen. Menu Language Selects a language for the display text. [In Digital Mode Only] Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several audio languages, you can select the language you want. [In Digital Mode Only] Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle Subtitle languages are broadcast. Language ✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ Try Now 3 Zoom Out Close . ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ1 . ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪꕌ/ꕍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی (ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖUser Guide) • ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ .ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ 3 1 4 ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ2 .ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ . ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ3 2 ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ1 .ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ . ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ2 . ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ3 ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖꕌ/ꕍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی .ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ4 .ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ 1 2 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ .ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ 33 ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ )ﺛﺒﺖ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ، ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ BACK HOME 1ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ BACK ﻭ HOMEﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﺕ 5ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ “ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ“ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ، ﻣﺪﺕ 5ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻱ BACKﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ 1 « 2 « ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ،ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﺪﺕ 10ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ • ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺎ 10ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ) 2/4ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ، ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ. • ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. • ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 1ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 1ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ 32 ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "".Magic Remote Control battery is low. Change the batteryﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ) 1.5ﻭﻟﺖ (AAﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﻭ ﺩﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ. )ﻓﻘﻂ , , ( , ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ (RF HOME ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ BACK HOME ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ /ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ /ﭼﭗ / ﺭﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. + ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ꕌPꕍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. MUTE ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. MY APPS ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. 3D ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. 11-1 Brief Info Title Test... Info. P MY APPS 1 2 3 My Apps 3 )(POWER ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. BACK ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی My Appsﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ 31 )ﻓﻘﻂ **(LM76**, LM67**, LM661*, LM660*, LM64**, LM62 HOME ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﺍ. MY APPS ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ /ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ /ﭼﭗ /ﺭﺍﺳﺖ( ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. OK ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. )(Back ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. GUIDE ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. RATIO INPUT TV/ RAD 3 2 1 6 5 4 9 8 7 Q.VIEW 0 LIST FAV P A G E MUTE SETTINGS MY APPS OK EXIT GUIDE 1 SUBTITLE Q.MENU T.OPT TEXT 2 LIVE TV REC ENERGY INFO SAVING ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی AVﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻣﻨﻮی SIMPLINKﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ )(User Guide ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. RATIO ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. INPUT ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ DTVﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. TV/RAD ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ. LIST ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ Q.VIEW ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. FAV ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ. 3D ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. PAGE ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ. SETTINGS ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ EXIT ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. 1ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ. :ﺁﺑﯽ( :ﺯﺭﺩ :ﺳﺒﺰ ) :ﻗﺮﻣﺰ 2ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ. SUBTITLE ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. Q. MENU ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﺩﻧﺴﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ LIVE TV ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ( ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ) ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ) (MY MEDIAﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ) REC ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی DVRﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. ENERGY SAVING ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. INFO ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ 30 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ،ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی 1/5ﻭﻟﺖ) (AAAﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ. ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ،ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ. • ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ،ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. )ﻓﻘﻂ *(LM669 3D ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. TV/RAD ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ. GUIDE ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. INFO ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ ،ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. SUBTITLE ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. Q. MENU ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ INPUT ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ DTVﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. LIST ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ Q.VIEW ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. POWER TV/RAD INPUT SUBTITLE Q.MENU Q.VIEW INFO GUIDE LIST MY APPS HOME EXIT FAV P A G E P MUTE 1 LIVE TV HOME ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﺍ. MY APPS ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ /ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ /ﭼﭗ /ﺭﺍﺳﺖ( ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. OK ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. )(Back ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. REC T.OPT 2 TEXT EXIT ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. FAV ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ. )(User Guide ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. PAGE ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ. 1ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ. :ﺁﺑﯽ( :ﺯﺭﺩ :ﺳﺒﺰ ) :ﻗﺮﻣﺰ LIVE TV ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ( ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ) ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ) (MY MEDIAﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ) REC ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی DVRﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. 2ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ 29 ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ USBﻧﻈﻴﺮﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﻤﻮﺭی ،ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی Smart Shareﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ 3 USB Apps • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( HDD 1 HDD IN ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. USB IN 2 USB Hub USB Hub )ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،USB Hubﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ USB IN 2 USB Hubﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ USB Hubﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ USB Hubﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. )ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( OPTICAL AUDIO IN ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ) ACPﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB 28 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ. ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ IN IN AV COMPONENT )ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(. ﺁﺑﯽ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺯﺭﺩ DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box ﺁﺑﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﺰ )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( R VIDEO ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ( . ﺁﺑﯽ )ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(. ﺯﺭﺩ Y VIDEO Y PB AUDIO ﺯﺭﺩ PB PR AUDIO COMPONENT PR AV VIDEO L AUDIO ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. L (MONO) AUDIO R VIDEO VCR / DVD / Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ 27 ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ DVI-HDMIﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ DVIﺑﻪ HDMI ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ RGB-PC ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی HDMIﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ. )4 (PC )(RGB/HDMI-PC AUDIO IN )(PC RGB 3 IN )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( 2 IN )(RGB/HDMI-PC )1(ARC AUDIO RGB OUT (PC) AUDIO OUT PC )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( DVI OUT AUDIO OUT DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / PC ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ،ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ HDMIﺑﻪ DVI ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺣﺎﻟﺖ DOSﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. • ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ DVI-HDMIﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ HDMI IN 4ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 26 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMI ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ HDMIﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی HDMIﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ )4 (PC 3 IN DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / HD STB / PC 2 )1(ARC )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( HDMI ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • • • • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMIﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ HDMIﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ) CECﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ HDMIﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ 1080pﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ. ﺻﺪﺍی DTVﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ : • ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ HDMIﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ : ) ARCﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ( • ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ SIMPLINKﻭARC ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ HDMI IN 1 ) (ARCﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ، ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ARCﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ SPDIFﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ •ﻭﻧﻴﺰ SIMPLINKﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ 25 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ** LM76 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ) 75ﺍﻫﻢ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ IN ANTENNA/CABLE ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ :ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ، HDﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ، DVDﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ،ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ، USBﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • • • • • • • ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ DVDﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ DVDﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ،ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ،ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ،ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ،ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺣﻴﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • • • • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 2ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﻠﻴﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. 24 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • • ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • • ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻘﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ VESAﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ( , )ﻓﻘﻂ 1ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ. ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • • • • • • ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ VESA ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ،ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ( )ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻓﻘﻂ , , , 1 2 , ( ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﯽ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ، ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ( • ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﭘﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﻳﺪ. ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 23 ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ(. ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ 1 2 3 ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ،ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ VESAﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی( ﻣﺪﻝ (A x B) VESA ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی • ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ 200 x 200 M6 4 LSW200BX LSW220BX 400 x 400 M6 4 LSW400BX LSW420BX ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺑﺮﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ،ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻣﺪﻝ (A x B) VESA ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی **65LM62 600 x 400 M8 4 LSW600B A B LSW620B 22 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ ،ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ. ( , )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ(. ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ 20ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ( , )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 20 , )ﻓﻘﻂ , ( 20 ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ 10ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. , , )ﻓﻘﻂ , , * ( 10 10 ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ M4 x 8 • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. « ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. 2EA ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ( , , )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ 1ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 2ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 3ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ،ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. , )ﻓﻘﻂ *, , , ( >ﺟﻠﻮ< >ﻋﻘﺐ< ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 21 ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ 1 ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮی )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ( ﺍﺯﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﻟﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ) .ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ( ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺮﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ 0 1ﺳﺎﻧﺘ ﯽﻣﺘﺮ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ • ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ،ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 2 ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. 20 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی , 32/ 1 , 1 M4 x 20 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ M4 x 20 4EA 4EA ﺟﻠﻮ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ 2 2 3 3 M4 x 20 M4 x 20 4EA 4EA ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 19 , , , 1 4 ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ M4 x 20 4EA ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ M4 x 20 ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ 4EA 2 ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ 5 ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ 3 18 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 4 1 ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ M4 x 20 4EA ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ 2 M4 x 20 4EA ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ 5 3 ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 17 ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ 2ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ ،ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ،ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ. • ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. • ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ) .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ • ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی ،ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ. 16 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻒ : ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ: , , , ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ 1 ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ OK 4 ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ SETTINGS ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ INPUT ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ 1 ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ INPUT ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻒ SETTINGS OK 2 ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ. ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. OKꔉ S SETTINGSﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ. INPUT I/ 1 2 ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ -ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ) OPTIONﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 15 ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ P ﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی Dual play AN-MR300 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ Dual play ﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی 3ﺑﻌﺪی AN-WF100 ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ , ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی , , , , ﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ Dual play • • ﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی 3ﺑﻌﺪی • • AN-MR300 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ • AN-WF100 ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ • ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ،ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ. )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( • 14 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ /ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 20 ,18ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ /ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻓﻘﻂ , )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 20 ,19ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ( , , , , ( ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ GNDﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.« ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ GNDﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭیﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. « ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. .1ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ANTENNA/ CABLE IN ﮐﺎﺑﻞ /ﺁﻧﺘﻦ .2ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ /ﺟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ -ﻭﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻮﺍﮐﺴﻴﺎﻝ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ EN 60728-11ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ، RFﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭی ﺍﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 13 ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ )(AA )ﻓﻘﻂ ENERGY AV MODE INPUT TV SAVING 2 1 5 4 9 8 7 FLASHBK 0 3 6 MARK LIST FAV P A G E CH 3D VOL MUTE Q.MENU MENU INFO ENTER EXIT L/R SELECT FREEZE ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ )(AAA )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 31 ,30ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( , ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 32ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 28ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 28ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی 3ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ Dual play )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 24ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ M4 x 20, 8 EA )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 20, 19 ,18ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ) : 1EAﻓﻘﻂ ( , , ) : 2EAﻓﻘﻂ ( , )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 22ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی 2EA , )ﻓﻘﻂ ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 22ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ M4 x 8, 2 EA , )ﻓﻘﻂ ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 22ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی 4EA ( )ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 24ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( , P , ﻳﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 14ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ RATIO BACK , ( , 12 ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ /ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • • • ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • • • ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ 1 2 3 4 ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﺯﮐﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی HDMIﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی USBﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 10ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﺍﺯ 18ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﻳﺎ USBﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ USBﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ USB 2.0ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. B B A < mm 10 *)= (A A < mm 18 *)= (B ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ 11 ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ • ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ /ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ 5ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ 10ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. • ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 19ﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ،ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ .ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻨﺪ. • ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. • • • • ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﯽ ،ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. 10 ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی( ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ • ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ 1ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ 5ﺗﺎ 15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ ،ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ ،ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ • • • • ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﻬﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺻﺮﻉ ،ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻗﻠﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻚ ﭼﺸﻢ ،ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻜﻤﺎﺗﻴﺴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ،ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ. • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﯽ ،ﭘﺮﮐﺎﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ ،ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭﺩ ،ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ ،ﺗﻬﻮﻉ ،ﺗﭙﺶ ﻗﻠﺐ ،ﺗﺎﺭی ﭼﺸﻢ،ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ،ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ،ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ 9 • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻤﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. • ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ 2ﺗﺎ 6ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺴﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ،ﺁﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺩﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﭼﭗ /ﺭﺍﺳﺖ /ﺑﺎﻻ /ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ( ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﺭﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ،ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ(ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺳﯽ ﺩی 2ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 1ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ 4:3ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. • ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻕ :ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻙ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ .ﺻﺪﺍی ﻭﺯ ﻭﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ /ﻫﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ، ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ،ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ. 8 ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ /ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 10ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺪ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ،ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ،ﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ،ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ،ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻻی ﺩﺭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ،ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ،ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮی ،ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ،ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﮐﺲ ،ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ،ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ) .ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ،ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ( • ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ،ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ،ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ 7 ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ. • ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻌﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ،ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ) VESAﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ،ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. 7 • ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ 5ﺗﺎ 7ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. • ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻣﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 6 ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ • ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ،ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ. ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ،ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ 5 • ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﻠﻌﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻫﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( • ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺳﻜﻪ ،ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﺳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﮐﺒﺮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ )ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ • ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ،ﻓﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. • ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. 4 ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ • ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ. ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ،ﺷﻮﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ. ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ.ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ،ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ،ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ) .ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(. ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﺭی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ. ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ /ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ 3 ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی www.lg.comﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. HDMIﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ HDMIﻭ High-Definition Multimedia Interfaceﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ HDMI Licensing LLC ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ DivX® :DIVX VIDEOﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ .Roviﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ DivXﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ DivXﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی divx.comﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMANDﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ،ﻗﺴﻤﺖ DivX VODﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی divx.comﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. " ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ® DivXﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ HD 1080pﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ. , ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی Rovi Corporationﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. "ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ: "7,295,673;7,460,668;7,515,710;7,519,274, ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ 5,956,674;5,974,380;6,487,535 : ، DTSﻋﻼﻣﺖ DTSﻭ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ DTS 2.0+Digital Outﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی DTS,Inc hﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ DTS,Incﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ GPLﻭ LGPLﻭ MPLﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی http://opensource.lge.comﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻟﻮﺡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ،ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ [email protected]ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ 3ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ .ﻋﻼﻣﺖ Dolbyﻭ Dﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. .Dolby Laboratories 2 ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ 3 ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ 35 ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی 3 ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ 35 35 35 ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﻗﺎﺏ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ -ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ 4 ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ 35 ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ 10 -ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی( 12 ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ 12 ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی 12 15 16 17 18 18 21 23 24 ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ 25 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ 25 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMI ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ DVIﺑﻪ HDMI ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ RGB-PC ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ USB 30 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ 32 ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ 33 33 33 ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ 34 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 36 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ،ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮگ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ LCD LED ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. **LM62 **LM64 **LM66 **LM67 **LM76 www.lg.com
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- 106.7 cm (42") Edge-LED
- Full HD 1920 x 1080 pixels
- TruMotion 100 Hz
- DVB-T
- Smart TV Internet TV
- Ethernet LAN